617804
768
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/770
Next page
Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016 Cherokee
2016
First Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
16KL74-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................119
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................317
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................469
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................615
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................657
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................729
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................735
10
INDEX .....................................................................745
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ........................4
ROLLOVER WARNING ...................4
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............7
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....8
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
4 INTRODUCTION
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The
VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on
the right front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear
most position a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted
to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
of the engine block.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) If Equipped. .12
Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............13
Key Fob If Equipped ..................14
Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........15
General Information ....................17
SENTRY KEY ..........................17
Replacement Keys .....................18
Customer Key Programming ..............19
General Information ....................19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF
EQUIPPED ............................19
Rearming Of The System ................20
To Arm The System ....................20
To Disarm The System ...................21
Security System Manual Override ...........22
ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................22
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........23
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........24
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............25
2
Using The Panic Alarm ..................25
Programming Additional Transmitters .......26
Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........26
General Information ....................29
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF
EQUIPPED ............................30
How To Use Remote Start ................30
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) If Equipped ..............31
To Enter Remote Start Mode...............32
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle .............................32
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..............................32
Remote Start Comfort Systems If
Equipped ...........................33
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation If Equipped ................34
General Information ....................34
DOOR LOCKS .........................34
Manual Door Locks .....................34
Power Door Locks .....................35
Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear
Doors ..............................37
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO ..................39
General Information ....................44
WINDOWS ...........................45
Power Windows .......................45
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting .......................48
LIFTGATE ............................48
Power Liftgate If Equipped .............50
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........52
Important Safety Precautions ..............53
Seat Belt Systems ......................54
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........66
Child Restraints .......................91
Transporting Pets .....................113
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .113
SAFETY TIPS .........................114
Transporting Passengers .................114
Exhaust Gas .........................115
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................116
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................118
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM).
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Push Button Ignition.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1 OFF
2 ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 ON/RUN
4 START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 OFF
2 ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position. In addition to the chime, the ignition or acces-
sory on message will display in the cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sun-
roof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Emergency Key Removal (Keyless Push Button Ignition
System)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program-
ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and liftgate release are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
The park lamps and/or turn signals will flash.
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting
And Operating for further information).
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in
Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for
further information).
Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if
equipped). Refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor-
mation.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (re-
quires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the panic alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Emergency Key Removal
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set-
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if
equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter
Case
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, and then
replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Separating Keyless Ignition Node Transmitter Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Shift Lever in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if
the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start
prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted Door Open
Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button. If the START/
STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the
ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the
EVIC/DID until you insert the key. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver
Information Display” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the message “Remote Start Active Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC/DID until you
push the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For
more information on Remote Start Comfort System op-
eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation If Equipped
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause severe personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition to the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in
your radio.
Power Door Lock Switch
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
be opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the win-
dow, and open the door with the outside door handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and
it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters
outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC/DID (if equipped), all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press is programmed in Uconnect, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
on the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
Location
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in Vehicle
remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-
Down feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset AUTO-Up
Should the AUTO-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset AUTO-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or par-
tially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows to-
gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Window Lockout Switch
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press is programmed in Uconnect, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
on the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry LOCK
button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front
door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
Liftgate Entry
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” located in “Things To Know Be-
fore Starting”) or by pushing the LIFTGATE
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five
seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
panel, near the liftgate opening. Push the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel once will close the
liftgate only. This button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings),
and the liftgate chime will be audible. Refer to Uconnect
Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
open the liftgate and then push it again to close.
If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will dis-
engage to allow manual operation.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under If You Need Assistance.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can
cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm .
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
ALR = Automatic Locking Retractor
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Advanced Front Air Bags
Supplemental Side Air Bags
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
2 Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
3 Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bol-
ster
4 Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/Passenger Knee Im-
pact Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-
power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power
deployment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-
senger seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passengers
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in
vehicles equipped with rear seat SABs) seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impact and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the seam on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim
cover (outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs).
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
Unlock the power door locks.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING! (Continued)
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–732–8243.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster
seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH an-
chorage system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower an-
chorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints may be removed in every
rear seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH—compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH—compatible position in your vehicle
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child
restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to
install the center child restraint and you must use the
LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You
Tether Anchorage Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the third child seat in position (1)
behind the front passenger.
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing
and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint
an occupant or child restraint in the center seating
position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and
D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left out-
board seating position (3) for any occupant. The center
child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this
position.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You must use
the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in
position (3), behind the driver. You may use either
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing the child seat in position (1), behind the
front passenger. Please refer to “Installing the
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described her
e.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraints may be re-
moved in every rear seating posi-
tion.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all win-
dows are closed and the climate control BLOWER
switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
MIRRORS ............................126
Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped . . . .126
Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror If
Equipped ...........................126
Outside Mirrors ......................133
Power Mirrors .......................134
Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped.......135
Heated Mirrors If Equipped ...........136
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped . . .136
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature If
Equipped ...........................137
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) IF
EQUIPPED ...........................137
Rear Cross Path (RCP) .................143
Modes Of Operation ...................145
General Information....................146
SEATS ..............................146
Power Seats If Equipped ..............147
Manual Seats If Equipped .............148
Front Heated Seats If Equipped .........151
Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped .......152
3
Head Restraints ......................153
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature ............................157
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
Programming The Memory Feature .........160
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory .............161
Memory Position Recall .................162
Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................163
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........164
LIGHTS .............................165
Headlight Switch .....................165
Automatic Headlights If Equipped .......166
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............166
Headlight Time Delay ..................167
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If
Equipped ...........................168
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) If
Equipped ...........................168
Lights-On Reminder ...................169
Fog Lights If Equipped ...............169
Multifunction Lever ...................170
Turn Signals .........................170
Lane Change Assist ...................171
High/Low Beam Switch ................171
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass ........................171
Front Map/Reading Lights ...............171
Interior Lights .......................172
Battery Saver Feature ..................174
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......174
Windshield Wiper Operation .............175
Intermittent Wiper System ...............176
Windshield Washer Operation.............176
Mist ...............................177
Windshield Wiper De-Icer If Equipped . . . .178
Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped ........179
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN ............................180
HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF
EQUIPPED ...........................181
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF
EQUIPPED ...........................183
To Activate ..........................184
To Set A Desired Speed .................184
To Deactivate ........................185
To Resume Speed .....................185
To Vary The Speed Setting ...............185
To Accelerate For Passing ...............186
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF
EQUIPPED ...........................187
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .189
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .190
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
To Activate/Deactivate..................191
To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............192
To Cancel ...........................193
ToTurnOff..........................193
To Resume ..........................194
To Vary The Speed Setting ...............194
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......197
Overtake Aid ........................201
ACC Operation At Stop .................201
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......202
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........203
Precautions While Driving With ACC .......206
General Information....................210
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode ........................210
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED .......214
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ...................214
Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............216
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .217
FCW Limited Warning ..................218
Service FCW Warning ..................218
LANESENSE IF EQUIPPED .............218
LaneSense Operation ...................218
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............219
LaneSense Warning Message..............221
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing LaneSense Status ..............229
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF
EQUIPPED ...........................229
ParkSense Sensors .....................230
ParkSense Warning Display ..............230
ParkSense Display .....................231
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........235
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................236
Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........237
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........237
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST IF EQUIPPED .................239
ParkSense Sensors .....................241
ParkSense Warning Display ..............241
ParkSense Display .....................242
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........251
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .252
Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........253
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........253
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ................256
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System.....................257
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................259
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................268
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................280
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED . . .282
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .283
Programming A Rolling Code .............284
Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........286
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......287
Using HomeLink .....................289
Security ............................289
Troubleshooting Tips ...................289
General Information....................290
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF
EQUIPPED ...........................291
Opening Sunroof Express ..............293
Opening Sunroof Manual Mode .........293
Closing Sunroof Express...............293
Closing Sunroof Manual Mode ..........294
Venting Sunroof Express ..............294
Opening Power Shade Express ..........294
Opening Power Shade Manual Mode .....294
Closing Power Shade Express ...........295
Closing Power Shade Manual Mode ......295
Pinch Protect Feature ...................295
Wind Buffeting .......................295
Sunroof Maintenance ...................296
Ignition OFF Operation .................296
POWER OUTLETS .....................296
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED ........300
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD IF
EQUIPPED ...........................302
Wireless Charging Pad Operation ..........303
CUPHOLDERS ........................305
STORAGE ............................306
Glove Compartment ...................306
Console Storage Compartment ............307
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If
Equipped ...........................308
CARGO AREA FEATURES ................309
Cargo Load Floor .....................309
Cargo Extension Panels .................310
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops ........310
Rear Storage Bins......................311
REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............312
Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............312
Rear Window Defroster .................313
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED . . . .314
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
Uconnect Access Customer Care In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Models With Express Window Feature
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then push one of the four arrow buttons
Power Mirror Switches
1 Mirror Direction Control
2 Left And Right Mirror Select
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position
following an adjustment.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Models Without Express Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then push one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi-
mately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
Rear Detection Zones
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Warning Light Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
RCP Detection Zones
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Manual Seats If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Front Seat Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
Seat Height Adjustment
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 Release Button
2 Adjustment Button
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-
table DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
Up, Mid and Down. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there is no occupant in the center seat the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for
the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Outboard Head Restraint
1 Release Button
2 Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint
1 Adjustment Button
2 Release Button
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment If
Equipped
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on
the middle outer edge of the seat.
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
appropriate number button on the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
Driver Memory Switch
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then push the number (1) button within five
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then push the number (2) button within five
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a push of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release the
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, followed
by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the front edge of
the hood, slightly off-center to the right.
Hood Release
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-
matic headlights if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights if equipped.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
Headlight Switch
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/
DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off,
push the switch a second time. These lights also turn on
when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pushed, or
when the dimmer control is turned completely upward
to the second detent.
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats.
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the lens.
To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted
cupholders if equipped.
Ambient Light Control If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and
radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on
the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
(Continued)
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
CAUTION! (Continued)
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
Intermittent Wiper Operation
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
viously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
Activation By Rear Defrost The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33° F (0.6° C).
Mist Control
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Activation By Remote Start Operation When re-
mote start is active and the outside ambient tempera-
ture is less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
resume previous operation except, if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.
Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as de-
sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 ON/OFF 4 SET-/DECEL
2 SET+/ACCEL 5 CANCEL
3 RESUME
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 SET+/ACCEL
3 RESUME
4 SET-/DECEL
5 DISTANCE SETTING INCREASE
6 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 DISTANCE SETTING DECREASE
8 CANCEL
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is set.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the driver door is open.
When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC/DID.
The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pushed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
The ignition is turned OFF.
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET + button or SET
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Brake Alert
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Offset Driving Condition Example
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
The ignition is turned off.
You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
FCW Message
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED
turns off).
Forward Collision Button
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Function-
ality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane
Sense On” message is shown in the EVIC/DID.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Button Lane Sense On Message
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
3.5 EVIC Screen If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Left Lane Departure Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left
thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indi-
cator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn
solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indi-
cator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7.0 DID Screen If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Left Lane Departure Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65
cm)
25-12 in
(65-30
cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
Arcs Left None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flash-
ing
Arcs Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st Flash-
ing
Arcs Right None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flash-
ing
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continu-
ous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or
ParkSense Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
“Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the EVIC/DID will display the PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An
open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-
ing with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in
the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed
is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ParkSense Active
Park Assist System section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
7 Driver Information Display (DID)” for further infor-
mation.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65
cm)
25-12 in
(65-30
cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
Arcs Left None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flash-
ing
Arcs Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st Flash-
ing
Arcs Right None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flash-
ing
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continu-
ous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
No Tone/Solid Arc No Tone/Flashing Arc
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or
ParkSense Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
“Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS,orthePARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds.
When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at ei-
ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS,orPARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-
play (DID)” for further information.
If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS
or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
(Continued)
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will also continuously perform the dy-
namic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again
(LED turns off).
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
The parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
Driver’s door is opened.
Rear liftgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
Gear position is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
Driver’s door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you
desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting.
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Space Found Keep Moving Forward Space Found Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Space Found Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings Move Backward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings STOP
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings Shift To Drive Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Check Surroundings Move Forward Check Surroundings STOP
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-
VERSE position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is en-
abled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to
Switch to Perpendicular” message will show in the
EVIC/DID display. Push the OK button on the left side
Check Surroundings Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete Check Parking Position
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch
back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to
Switch to Parallel” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
display.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Space Found Keep Moving Forward Space Found Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Space Found Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings Move Backward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings STOP
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings Shift To Drive Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Check Surroundings Move Forward Check Surroundings STOP
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-
VERSE position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete Check Parking Position
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve-
hicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
WARNING! (Continued)
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON),
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the
OFF position.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink
channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center
button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 Door Opener
2 Training Button
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from
slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non
Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switches are located to the right be-
tween the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Shade Switches
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof Express
A comfort stop position and full open position are the
programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open posi-
tions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the
comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed
position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will
automatically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening). Push the switch rearward and release
it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position
and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof Manual Mode
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop
position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when
the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically
open to the half open position prior to the sunroof
opening). Push and hold the switch rearward again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and automati-
cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof Express
Push and release the Vent button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Opening Power Shade Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
completely.
Closing Power Shade Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet
has power available when the ignition switch is in the
ON or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet Power Distribution Center panel fuse from fuse
location F91 to F81.
Rear Power Outlet Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Con-
sole Bin
2 F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
3 F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at
all times)
4 F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
Power Inverter Location
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the
device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the invertexr.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located inside the upper portion of the center con-
sole. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile
device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone
provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit UconnectPhone.com for supported mobile
phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
Wireless Charging Pad
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
mobile phone’s coil location is different, you may need a
few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
phone:
1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad,
towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the
LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and
change the location.
2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green,
your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi
logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing
green, and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone
and reposition it on the charging pad.
Qi Logo Phone Alignment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle
to hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle
moves by pushing down on the finger tabs and
adjusting the cradle in or out.
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a
different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be
readjusted.
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile
phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to
function normally as it is charging.
WARNING!
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile
phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s)
such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT.
If metal object(s) become lodged between the mo-
bile phone and wireless charging pad, carefully
remove the mobile phone and allow the metal
object(s) to cool before removing. Failure to wait
until the object(s) cool could result in personal
injury, including burns.
Adjustable Finger Tabs
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle Key Fob on the wireless
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature may
not work properly while a mobile phone is being
charged.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
located in the center armrest.
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side
of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to
open the glove compartment.
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this
section for more information.
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Upper Console Charging Pad
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
cushion loop to open the storage compartment.
Center Console Storage
Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
section for further information.
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
Cargo Extension Panels
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded.
When the rear seats are moved to the more forward
positions and the rear seat backs are folded down, the
extension panels can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of
them). The extension panels can be used to extend the
load floor to the rear seats and/or hide the gap between
the load floor and rear seats, or to assist in loading large
items into the cargo area.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
Rear Storage Bins
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the switch bank by the manual climate controls.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
minutes of operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE:
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be
activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is
turned on and when the ambient temperature is below
33 degrees F (0.6° C).
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos-
sible and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........320
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE ..........321
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM ......324
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......326
Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............327
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............337
Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............354
White Telltale Indicator Light .............357
Blue Telltale Indicator Light ..............360
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) ..............................361
Oil Change Reset .....................363
EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............364
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....370
Oil Change Reset .....................372
DID Selectable Menu Items ..............373
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................379
Buttons On The Faceplate................380
Buttons On The Touchscreen..............381
4
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings Uconnect 5.0 Settings...........381
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings . . . .398
UCONNECT RADIOS IF EQUIPPED ......415
MEDIA HUB IF EQUIPPED .............416
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF
EQUIPPED ...........................416
Radio Operation ......................417
CD Player ...........................418
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........418
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .419
Regulatory And Safety Information .........419
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................421
Manual Climate Controls Without
Touchscreen If Equipped ..............421
Manual Climate Controls With
Touchscreen If Equipped ..............426
Windshield Wiper De-icer If Equipped . . . .431
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen If Equipped ..............432
Climate Control Functions ...............439
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......441
Operating Tips .......................442
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR .............446
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................446
Introducing Uconnect...................446
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started ..........................447
Basic Voice Commands..................449
Radio ..............................450
Media..............................451
Phone..............................453
Voice Text Reply ......................455
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................457
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................457
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ............459
Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................460
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............460
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............462
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) .....................463
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN).........464
Siri Eyes Free If Equipped .............465
Do Not Disturb ......................466
General Information ...................466
Additional Information .................467
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 Air Demister Outlet 5 Instrument Cluster 9 Passenger Air Bag 13 Start/Stop Ignition Button
2 Air Outlet 6 Cruise Controls 10 Glove Compartment 14 Liftgate Release Button
3 EVIC/DID Display Controls 7 Storage Compartment 11 Lower Switch Bank 15 Dimmer Switches
4 Horn/Driver Air Bag 8 Radio 12 Uconnect Feature Con-
trols If Equipped
16 Headlight Switch
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE
Base EVIC Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM
Premium DID Instrument Cluster
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Driver Information Display (DID)
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-
ther information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning Light What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures
rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C sys-
tem is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Warning Light What It Means
the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Liftgate Ajar Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Ajar Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Rear Fog Light Indicator
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is See manual, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the Wheels paragraph in the Technical data chapter, strictly com-
plying with the indications that you find there.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them ve-
hicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward Collision Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle.”
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Service 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not func-
tioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest ser-
vice center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
4WD Low Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Tell-
tale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC/DID and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense If
Equipped in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.
White Telltale Indicator Light
LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense
If Equipped in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in
the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these con-
ditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC Menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start (If Equipped)
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Control Buttons
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access
the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life.
5. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the
screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push the OK button to change the speedometer scale
from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle
through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, and follow the
prompts on each screen as needed.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining oil life.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
LaneSense
The EVIC displays the current LaneSense system set-
tings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted. Push and
hold the OK button to reset feature.
Range
Average Fuel Economy
Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Stop/Start Menu Item If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the
Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is high-
lighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
Compass
Outside Temp (default setting)
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Average MPG or L/100 km
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Current MPG or L/100 km
None
Upper Right
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Average MPG or L/100 km
Current MPG or L/100 km
None
Center
Menu Title (Default Setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG or L/100 km
Current MPG or L/100 km
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Information
Digital Speed
None
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings, Outside Temp UL, Compass UR, Center Menu
Title)
OK
Cancel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
The DID Menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start Info If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning If Equipped
Driver Information Display (DID) Location
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Control Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the OK button to change the speedom-
eter scale from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle
through the Vehicle Info sub-menus and follow the
prompts on each screen as needed.
1. Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot
be reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further informa-
tion.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temp Automatic Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4. Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
5. Oil Life
Displays the remaining oil life.
6. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu If Equipped
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
LaneSense If Equipped
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
Push and Hold the OK button to reset feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the “LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km) since the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG or L/100 km) form while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km) of Trip A or Trip B since
the last reset.
Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/
Start status.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button will allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
Compass
Outside Temp. (default)
Time
Range to Empty
Average L/100km (or MPG)
Current L/100km (or MPG)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
2. Upper Right
Compass (default)
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average L/100km (or MPG)
Current L/100km (or MPG)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
3. Center
Menu Title (default)
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average L/100km (or MPG)
Current L/100km (or MPG)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Inform
None
4. Gear Display If Equipped
Single
Full PRND (default)
5. Defaults
Ok
Cancel
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/
title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or DOWN
arrow to select a desired speed, then push and release
OK to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist (MSA)
Speed Warning telltale will display in the DID, and a
chime will sound with a pop up warning message when
the set speed is exceeded.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings Uconnect 5.0 Settings
Push the SETTINGS or the MORE button on the face-
plate, then the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access pro-
grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis-
play, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options,
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Sirius Setup,
Restore Settings, and Clear Personal Data, Brakes and
System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
Display Mode
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen.
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
When in this display, you may select to have the DID,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or
“Metric” to make your selection.
Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
touchscreen then select from “on” or “off.”
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Control Screen Time-Out If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.”
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.”
Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
LaneSense Warning If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
zone start point.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
LaneSense Strength If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
ParkSense If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,
press and release the “Sound” or “Sound and Display”
button.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Front ParkSense Volume If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Rear ParkSense Volume If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, and select “On”
or “Off.”
Blind Spot Alert If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select
“On” or “Off.”
Electric Park Brake Service Mode
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
Headlights With Wipers If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
the touchscreen and make your selection.
Auto High Beams If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your selec-
tion. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen and make your selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Horn w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on
the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or
“2nd Press.”
Horn w/Remote Start If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
Remote Door Unlock
When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may
choose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all
doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select
“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the
first push of the key fob.
NOTE:
Passive Entry If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Memory Linked to Fob If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Power Lift Gate Alert If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and
select from “On” or “Off.”
Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.”
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Exit Seats If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen.
Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
Compass Settings If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
Once properly set, the compass will automatically com-
pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
Compass Variance Zone Map
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch-
screen when the compass has been successfully cali-
brated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Surround Sound If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
AUX Volume Offset If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Loudness If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings
reset to default.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,
or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
up appears stating Personal data cleared”.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, select from
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Set Theme
This feature will allow you to choose a background
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
background color, highlight color, and button color of the
display screen.
Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen.
Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
Controls Screen Time-Out
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, To make your selection,
press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Clus-
ter” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the “12
hrs” or “24 hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
LaneSense Warning If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
zone start point.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle”.
LaneSense Strength If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
ParkSense If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,
press and release the “Sound” or “Sound and Display”
button.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Front ParkSense Volume If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Rear ParkSense Volume If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
Blind Spot Alert If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
Electric Park Brake Service Mode
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.
Headlights With Wipers If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected.
Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle”.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Lift Gate Chime If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Auto-On Comfort If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touch-
screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that setting has been selected.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Easy Exit Seat If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “+” or “-”
button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes,” or “10 minutes.”
Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
AUX Volume Offset If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Loudness If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
SiriusXM Setup If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
stating settings reset to default.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared.”
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
UCONNECT RADIOS IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
MEDIA HUB IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
External USB device, SD card or AUX electronic device to
be plugged into the port, slot or jack.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Media Hub
1 USB Port
2 SD Card Slot
3 AUX Jack
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system
can be operated through either the controls on the instru-
ment panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen
If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
1 RECIRCULATION Control 5 Air Conditioning (A/C)
2 Blower Control 6 REAR DEFROST Mode
3 MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
7 MODE Control
4 Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Blower Control
There are several blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-
wise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
operating.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
recirculated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-
mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the con-
denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE:
If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Stop/Start System If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-icer If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lo-
cated at the base of the windshield.
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically
once the following conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
below 33° F (0.6° C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-
mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen If
Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Uconnect Manual Climate Controls Buttons On The
Faceplate
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls Buttons
On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
7. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
when necessary.
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the
faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-
screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch-
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Windshield Wiper De-icer If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lo-
cated at the base of the windshield.
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically
once the following conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
below 33° F (0.6° C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-
mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen If Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
screen.
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
The buttons on your faceplate are also accessible on the
Uconnect system touchscreen.
Automatic Climate Controls Buttons On Your
Faceplate
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls Buttons
On Your Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls Buttons
On Your Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return to the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4
Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0 Only)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regu-
late the temperature of the air inside the passenger com-
partment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area,
indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature
bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings.
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX
A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect customer-
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System
Settings” in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Windshield Wiper De-icer If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lo-
cated at the base of the windshield.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically
once the following conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
below 33° F (0.6° C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-
mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Key Features:
5” touchscreen
Three buttons on either side of the display
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 Push To End Call
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
Cancel to stop a current voice session
Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
Change source to Bluetooth
Change source to AUX
Change source to USB
Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
Call John Smith
Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 Select “Settings”
2 Select “Bluetooth”
3 Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 Turn on “Show Notifications”
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
460 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 461
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
462 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP:
Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Messages are limited to 140 characters.
The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 Select “Settings”
2 Select “Bluetooth”
3 Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 463
3.
Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
push the VR button
, then say: “YELP search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Yelp
464 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
Show fuel prices
Show 5 - day weather forecast
Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
Siri Eyes Free If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 465
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-
hones.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
466 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. Fri., 8:00 am 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241 Please
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 467
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES ................474
Normal Starting.......................475
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) ..........................475
Extended Park Starting..................475
If Engine Fails To Start .................476
After Starting ........................477
STOP/START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ......477
Automatic Mode ......................477
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...........................478
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode ..............................479
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ............................481
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .481
System Malfunction ....................481
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED . . .482
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............483
Key Ignition Park Interlock...............484
5
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .485
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........485
Gear Ranges .........................487
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .........494
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) If
Equipped ...........................494
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) If
Equipped ...........................496
Shift Positions ........................497
Shifting Procedures ....................498
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System If
Equipped ...........................502
SELEC-TERRAIN ......................504
Description ..........................504
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................506
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................506
When To Use 4WD LOW Range ...........506
Driving Through Water .................507
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........508
Hill Climbing ........................508
Traction Downhill .....................509
After Driving Off-Road .................509
POWER STEERING .....................510
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) ............512
Auto Park Brake ......................516
SafeHold ...........................517
Brake Service Mode ....................517
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM .......................519
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .520
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .520
Brake System Warning Light..............520
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............520
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............522
Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............522
Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................523
Traction Control System (TCS) ............526
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........527
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........532
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............532
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)...............533
Rainy Brake Support (RBS) ...............533
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........533
Hill Descent Control (HDC) If Equipped . . .534
Selec Speed Control (SSC) If Equipped . . . .537
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............541
Tire Markings ........................541
Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........544
Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........546
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........547
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION ........552
Tire Pressure ........................552
Tire Inflation Pressures .................553
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .555
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Radial Ply Tires ......................555
Tire Types ...........................556
Run Flat Tires If Equipped .............558
Spare Tires If Equipped ...............558
Tire Spinning ........................561
Tread Wear Indicators ..................561
Life Of Tire .........................562
Replacement Tires .....................563
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......564
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....567
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .569
Premium System If Equipped ...........572
General Information....................576
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................577
Reformulated Gasoline .................577
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............578
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......578
MMT In Gasoline .....................579
Materials Added To Fuel ................579
Fuel System Cautions...................580
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............581
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) IF
EQUIPPED ...........................581
E-85 General Information ...............581
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................582
Fuel Requirements ....................582
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .......583
Starting ............................583
Cruising Range .......................584
Replacement Parts ....................584
Maintenance ........................584
ADDING FUEL ........................584
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........587
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............588
VEHICLE LOADING ....................588
Certification Label ....................588
TRAILER TOWING .....................591
Common Towing Definitions .............591
Trailer Hitch Classification ...............594
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .......................595
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............596
Towing Requirements ..................597
Towing Tips .........................602
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................604
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .604
Recreational Towing Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models .......................606
Recreational Towing 4X4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit....................607
Recreational Towing 4X4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit....................607
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting, “Extreme Cold Weather and Ex-
tended Park Starting procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel;
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it
2. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds.
3. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal.
4. Cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STOP/START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automati-
cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
“Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/
Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations the engine will not
stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
Fuel level.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AU-
TOSTOP.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the STOP/START system going into a
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-
tions of the items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications).
STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
A STOP/START system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The drivers door is open and brake pedal released.
The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is
unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off,
the engine may require a manual restart and the electric
park brake may require a manual release (depress brake
pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
STOP/START OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-
play (DID)“ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message ap-
pears in the EVIC/DID, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-
er’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position/mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
WARNING! (Continued)
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position/mode, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position/mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/
RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID). To select a gear range, press the lock button on the
shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of FCA current and future lineup of FWD/
AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel
economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combi-
nations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation in this section for further information). Mov-
ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the cur-
rent gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents auto-
matic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling
the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the
highest available gear.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear
limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Operation in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until the trans-
mission cools down.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
creased to make full use of available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
center console. Refer to Selec-Terrain in this section for
further information.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears.
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside DRIVE)
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift lever forward (-)
or rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward
(-). The transmission will shift to the range from which
the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) If Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) If Equipped
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
4WD LOW
REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
NEUTRAL
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
range position can be used to provide an additional gear
reduction which allows for increased torque to be deliv-
ered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause in-
creased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain – If Equipped” for further
information on the various positions and their intended
usages.
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position and the engine run-
ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and
remain on solid when the shift is complete.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a mes-
sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with
instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Driver Information Display (DID) in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position and the engine run-
ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press
the “4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out
when the shift is complete.
Selec-Terrain Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with instruc-
tions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver
Information Display (DID) in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow
the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blink-
ing (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Neutral Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System If
Equipped
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD
LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the
Selec-Terrain Knob.
Activating The Rear E-Locker
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
conditions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine
running.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
button once.
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
indicator light on.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine
running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
button once.
NOTE:
It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
and forth to complete engagement and disengagement
of the E-Locker.
When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the
REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights
in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK
button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete
the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling,
below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and
left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to
align.
The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD
LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a mes-
sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with
instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
SELEC-TERRAIN
Description
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
Auto Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide im-
proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
Selec-Terrain Switch
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclem-
ent weather. Use on and off road on loose traction
surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depend-
ing on certain operating conditions), the transmission
may use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
Sport This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
Sand/Mud Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
controls are set to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin.
Rock Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved
steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.
Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep
ruts, etc.
NOTE:
Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed
Control for steep downhill control. See “Electronic
Brake Control System” in this section for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display
Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and
Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further
details). This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm).
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches
(48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Trans-
fer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not
been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants
(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed
as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill -
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent
Control if equipped (refer to Electronic Brake Control
System in this section for further information). Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels
turning against engine compression drag. This will per-
mit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING OR
POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but
the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it
can only be released when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission,
when the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on
the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the park brake is engaging.
Electric Park Brake Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
The park brake will release automatically when the
ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt
is made to drive away.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
brake pedal, then push the park brake switch down
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the car while the parking brake disengages.
You may also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking
brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake sys-
tem; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is
turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
by customer selection through the customer program-
mable features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is
in RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will auto-
matically engage if all of the following conditions are
met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
For manual transmissions, the park brake will automati-
cally engage if all of the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The clutch pedal is not pressed.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open.
Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the
rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this
can only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu based
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The park brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the park brake system to
normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill
Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
WARNING! (Continued)
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the users safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Park brake must be off.
Driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the drivers
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-
play (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform
the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety or
the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
NOTE:
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if
equipped.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an
emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further informa-
tion. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h).
Parking brake is released.
Driver door is closed.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling
HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving con-
ditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
The parking brake is applied.
Driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) If Equipped
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Parking brake is released.
Driver door is closed.
Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
Driver releases throttle.
Driver releases brake.
Transmission is in any selection other than P.
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade
and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) If Equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-
selected set speed and corresponding driving condi-
tions.
SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
The parking brake is applied.
Driver door opens.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condi-
tions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 Maximum Load
2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure
3 Service Description 6 Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or
D means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety and Vehicle Stability
Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
(Continued)
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
drivers side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use on Front Tires Only
Due to limited clearance, the following traction de-
vices are recommended:
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire
sizes are not chainable.
The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with-
out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire
sizes are not chainable.
The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
CAUTION!
Use on Front Tires Only
Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models with-
out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
CAUTION! (Continued)
tire chains or traction devices are used with origi-
nal equipment size tires.
Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
Observe the traction device manufacturers instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turers if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the “forward cross” shown in the following
diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light”.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver information Display
(DID) will display a Tire Low message for a minimum
of five seconds, an Inflate to XX message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the Inflate to XX message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In
addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low
message, an Inflate to XX message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value in a different
color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure
values in place of the different color low tire pressure
value. The EVIC/DID will also display a “SPARE
LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to service
the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full
Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different
color pressure value and an Inflate to XX message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light”
will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2)
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded “Regular” gaso-
line having a posted octane number of 87
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emissions
control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
582 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional pro-
tection to FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 583
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door rein-
forcement.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).
584 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry
on the door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 585
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
586 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove access door located on right interior trim
panel for release cable with the tip of your key.
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
fuel filler door.
Fuel Door Release Location
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 587
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
Fuel Door Released
588 STARTING AND OPERATING
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 589
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
590 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and
ready for operation condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-
distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 591
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch,
you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a
collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
592 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 593
WARNING! (Continued)
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
594 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
Model Frontal Area
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
2.4L/Automatic
with or without
Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.2L/Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.2L/Automatic
with Trailer Tow
Package
FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq
m)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 595
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
596 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 597
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
598 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 599
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
600 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 Female Pins
2 Male Pin
3 Ground
4 Park
5 Left Stop/Turn
6 Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 601
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 Battery
2 Backup Lamps
3 Right Stop/Turn
4 Electric Brakes
5 Ground
6 Left Stop/Turn
7 Running Lamps
602 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Electronic Speed Control If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 603
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
4X4 Models
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions:
Transmission in
PARK
Power transfer
unit in NEU-
TRAL (N)
Tow in forward
direction
604 STARTING AND OPERATING
4X4 Models
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer pro-
grammable features in the Uconnect Settings.
When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 605
Recreational Towing Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the Key Fob, and
release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
606 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing 4X4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Recreational Towing 4X4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recre-
ational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is
adjacent to the 4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of
NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch in
any mode position.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or power trans-
fer unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 607
CAUTION! (Continued)
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this ve-
hicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
power transfer unit.
The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in
NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will
result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
608 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 609
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Neutral Switch
610 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do
not start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the Key Fob, and
release the brake pedal.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 611
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
by the selector switch.
Neutral Switch
612 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid
gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if desired.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 613
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........617
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............617
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................618
Torque Specifications ..................619
TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED .........620
Tire Service Kit Storage .................621
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .621
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........622
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ........625
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........631
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........632
Preparations For Jacking ................634
Jacking Instructions ...................635
Road Tire Installation ...................643
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........644
Preparations For Jump-Start ..............645
Jump Starting Procedure ................646
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............648
RECOVERY STRAP IF EQUIPPED .........650
6
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................651
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........652
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ..........654
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer
Unit ...............................655
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer
Unit ...............................656
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank below the radio screen.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways slow down.
In city traffic while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Components
1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob
2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 Power Button 8 Power Plug (located on the bot-
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631
WARNING! (Continued)
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the
back side of the load floor and place the hook over the
top body in white flange and weather seal. This will
hold the load floor up while obtaining the jack and
spare tire.
Load Floor Handle
632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire. 5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
Jack And Tool Assembly
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 633
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
634 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 635
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
636 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
Jacking Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 637
Rear Jacking Location Rear Jacking Engagement Point
638 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
Front Jacking Location Front Jacking Engagement Point
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 639
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
640 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 641
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
Assembled Jack Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
642 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 643
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
644 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
Positive Battery Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 645
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
646 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in serious injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 647
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator.
648 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
NOTE: Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC Off switch again to restore “ESC On”
mode.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 649
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
RECOVERY STRAP IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,
chains, or winch cables.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your
recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE
recommended anchor points or emergency towing an-
chor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
down point, these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any
other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap
over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage
the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has
reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps.
ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in
either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the ve-
hicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious
injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 feet from the
recovery area when using the recovery strap.
650 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are
secure and parked.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center
console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the shift lever override access hole (at the right front
corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 651
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the trans-
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 ve-
hicles may also be towed as described under “Recre-
ational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF
the Ground
FWD MODELS 1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED See instructions under “Rec-
reational Towing” in “Start-
ing And Operating”
Transmission in PARK
Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
Tow in forward direction
652 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF
the Ground
FWD MODELS 1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST
METHOD
OK BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 653
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position. Note that the Safehold
feature will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the
driver’s door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmis-
sion is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you
are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, you must manually disable the Electric Park
Brake each time the driver’s door is opened, by pressing
the brake pedal and then pushing the EPB switch down.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
so that the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
654 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 655
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power
Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power
Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction,
with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following
conditions:
The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
The transmission must be in PARK.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
656 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.4L ..........659
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.2L ..........660
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II . .661
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............661
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................662
REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................663
DEALER SERVICE ......................664
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........664
Engine Oil ..........................665
Engine Oil Filter ......................668
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................669
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...........672
Maintenance-Free Battery ...............674
Air Conditioner Maintenance .............675
Body Lubrication .....................679
Windshield Wiper Blades ...............680
Adding Washer Fluid ..................687
Exhaust System ......................688
Cooling System ......................690
7
Brake System ........................696
Automatic Transmission ................698
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................700
FUSES ..............................706
Power Distribution Center ...............707
Interior Fuses ........................716
VEHICLE STORAGE ....................718
REPLACEMENT BULBS .................718
BULB REPLACEMENT ..................720
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps .....720
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker
Lamps .............................721
Front Fog Lamp ......................722
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) .............722
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp .........723
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp ..........723
License Plate Lamp ....................724
FLUID CAPACITIES ....................725
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................726
Engine .............................726
Chassis ............................728
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.4L
1 Air Cleaner Filter 5 Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 Battery
3 Oil Fill Cap 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.2L
1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick
3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill
4 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 Air Cleaner Filter
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-
gine oils.
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 2.0L, 2.4L
Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 3.2L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also
shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should
change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb
and remove by pulling hose (If Equipped) away from
air cleaner filter cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 Screws
Air Cleaner Air Hose If Equipped
1 Air Filter Cleaner Cover
2 Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 Quick Connect Clip
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 Air Cleaner Cover
2 Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
1 Air Cleaner Filter
2 Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the
housing assembly and install air hose (if equipped).
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
panel
Console Closeout Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
tors.
Hush Panel Air Filter Cover Location
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the fol-
lowing points:
Wear Or Uneven Edges
Foreign Material
Hardening Or Cracking
Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1—Wiper
2 Release Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 Wiper Blade
2 Release Tab
3 Wiper Arm
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 Wiper Blade
2 Wiper Arm
3 Release Tab
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2—WiperArm
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1—WiperArmPivotCap
2 Wiper Arm
3 Wiper Blade
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 Wiper Blade
2 Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 Wiper Arm
4 Wiper Arm Receptacle
686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691
CAUTION! (Continued)
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697
WARNING! (Continued)
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 701
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
702 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F06 Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module - PCM (Diesel Only)
F08 25 Amp Clear Engine Control Module (ECM)/Fuel Injection
F09 Not Used
F10 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - If Equipped
F11 Not Used
F12 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
F13 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power Take-Off Unit
(PTU) / Brake System Module (BSM) - If Equipped/Brake
Pedal Switch/Back Up Switch (Diesel Only)
F15 Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow Ign Coil (Gas) / Engine Sensor (Diesel)
F17 Not Used
F18 Not Used
708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F19 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 Not Used
F22 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan
F23 70 Amp Tan Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 2
F23 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) Feed #2 - If Equipped with
Stop/Start Engine Option
F24 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
F25B 20 Amp Yellow Front Washer - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
F26 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
F27 Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (TCM)
F29 Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)
F31 Not Used
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F32 Not Used
F33 Not Used
F34 Not Used
F35 Not Used
F36 Not Used
F37 Not Used
F38 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel Only) - If Equipped
F39 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light - If Equipped
F40 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer Pump - If Equipped
F41 60 Amp Yellow Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 1
F41 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module - Feed 1 - If Equipped with Stop/
Start Engine Option
F42 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake Module - If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
710 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F44 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector - If Equipped
F45 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) - If Equipped
F46 25 Amp Clear Sunroof - If Equipped
F48 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module - If Equipped
F49 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V A/C) - If Equipped
F50 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate - If Equipped
F51 Not Used
F52 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
F53 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module & Valves
F54 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red Blind Spot Sensors / Compass / Rearview Camera / Trunk
Lamp With Flashlamp Charger - If Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric
Steering Column Lock (ESL)
F57 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Lights Left - If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 711
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F58 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module/VSM/ESC
F59 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) If Equipped
F60 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet - Center Console
F61 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Lights Right - If Equipped
F62 20 Amp Yellow Windshield de-icer - If Equipped
F63 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated/Vented Seats - If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow Heated Steering Wheel - If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver
Assist System Module (DASM) / Park Assist (PAM) - If
Equipped with Stop/Start option
F66 15 Amp Blue HVAC (ECC) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F67 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver
Assist System Module (DASM) / Park Assist (PAM) - If
Not Equipped with Stop/Start Option
F68 Not Used
712 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F69 10 Amp Red Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) / Active Grill Shutter
(AGS) - If Equipped with Gas Engine
69A 10 Amp Red Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) - If Equipped with Die-
sel Engine
F70 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor If Equipped with Stop/Start En-
gine Option
F71 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Right if Equipped with Stop/Start Engine
Option
F72 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
F73 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Back Up - If Equipped
F74 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster
F75 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
F76 20 Amp Yellow Rear Differential Module (RDM) - If Equipped
F77 10 Amp Red Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal Switch
F78 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port / Digital TV (Japan Only)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 713
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F79 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC / Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow Radio / CD - If Equipped
F81 Not Used
F82 Not Used
F83 20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module (Gas)
F84 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Left
F85 Not Used
F86 20 Amp Yellow Horns - If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F87A 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Left - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine
Option
F88 15 Amp Blue Collision Mitigation Module (CMM) / Electrochromatic
Mirror / Smart Camera Module - If Equipped
F89 10 Amp Red Headlamp Leveling - If Equipped
F90 Not Used
714 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F91 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Rear - If Equipped - Customer Selectable
F92 Not Used
F93 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) - Pump Motor
F94 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Right
F95 10 Amp Red Electrochromatic Mirror / Rain Sensor / Sunroof - If
Equipped / Passenger Window Switch / Power Outlet
Console / Digital TV (Japan Only)
F96 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
F98 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier - If Equipped
F99 Not Used
F100 Not Used
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 715
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com-
partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-
ment panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right If Equipped
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad If Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors If Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
716 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F89 10 Amp Red Door Locks Driver Unlock
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 717
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
718 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps HIR2
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamps LED ( Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Back-Up Lamps W16W or 921
License Plate Lamp W5W
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 719
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to
gain access to the headlamp bulb cap.
720 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket
assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 721
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing if removed.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to
gain access to the bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp
housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise
to lock it in place.
6. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
722 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
lamp housing until it locks in place.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to
the vehicle.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
10. Close the liftgate.
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
panel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 723
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
lamp.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
11. Close the liftgate.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
724 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 725
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Standard
MS.90032.
Engine Oil 2.4L
Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil 3.2L
Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 2.4L
Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engines
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
726 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection 2.4L
and 3.2L Engines
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 727
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
728 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............730 Maintenance Chart.....................732
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-
play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
730 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 731
Maintenance Chart
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
732 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 733
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
734 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................737
Prepare For The Appointment.............737
Prepare A List ........................737
Be Reasonable With Requests .............737
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............737
FCA US LLC Customer Center ............738
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........738
In Mexico Contact .....................739
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........739
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............739
Service Contract ......................739
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............741
MOPARPARTS ........................741
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............741
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................741
In Canada...........................741
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............742
9
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................743
Treadwear...........................743
Traction Grades .......................743
Temperature Grades....................744
736 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 737
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
738 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 739
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
740 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 741
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
742 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 743
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
744 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................519
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .187
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............692
Additives, Fuel ...........................579
AirBag...............................66, 67
Advance Front Air Bag ....................68
Air Bag Operation .......................69
Air Bag Warning Light ..................70, 87
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................79
Enhanced Accident Response ................86
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................90
FrontAirBag ........................66, 70
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag ...............79
If A Deployment Occurs ...................85
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............89
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............89
Side Air Bags ...........................79
Transporting Pets .......................113
Air Bag Deployment ........................66
Air Bag Light ......................87, 116, 328
Air Bag Maintenance .......................89
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .669
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................675
Air Conditioning ......................421, 426
Air Conditioning Controls................421, 426
Air Conditioning Filter ..................444, 677
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........442, 445
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............675, 676
Air Conditioning System .......421, 426, 432, 441, 675
Air Filter ...............................669
Air Pressure, Tires.........................553
Alarm
Arm The System ........................20
Alarm, Panic .............................25
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................19, 331
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................19
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................494
746 INDEX
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............691, 725
Disposal ..............................694
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................520
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................345
Appearance Care .........................700
Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Assist, Hill Start ..........................523
Auto Down Power Windows ..................46
Automatic Door Locks ....................36, 37
Automatic Headlights ......................166
Automatic High Beams .....................168
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .421, 432, 441
Automatic Transaxle .......................483
Automatic Transmission .................485, 699
Adding Fluid .......................699, 728
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................699
Fluid Change ..........................699
Fluid Level Check ...................698, 699
Fluid Type .........................698, 728
Special Additives .......................698
Torque Converter .......................494
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................37
Auto Up Power Windows ....................46
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........296
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................296
Axle Fluid ..............................728
Axle Lubrication ..........................728
Battery .............................334, 674
Charging System Light ...................334
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........26
Belts, Seat...............................116
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................137
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................679
B-Pillar Location ..........................547
Brake Assist System .......................522
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............520
10
INDEX 747
Brake Fluid .............................728
Brakes .................................519
Brake System .........................519, 696
Fluid Check ........................696, 728
Master Cylinder ........................696
Warning Light .........................329
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................485
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................172
Bulb Replacement......................718, 720
Bulbs, Light ..........................118,718
Camera, Rear ............................280
Capacities, Fluid ..........................725
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................584
Oil (Engine) ....................659, 660, 667
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................694
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............115,581
Cargo Area Features .......................309
Cargo Compartment .......................309
Cargo Load Floor .........................309
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................310
Car Washes .............................700
Certification Label.........................588
Changing A Flat Tire .......................631
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................542
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .662
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............114
Checks, Safety............................114
Child Restraint ............................91
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................96
Child Restraints .........................91
Child Seat Installation ....................110
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......107
Infants And Child Restraints ................94
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .105
748 INDEX
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt .................................108
LATCH Positions ........................99
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............102
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......98
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........94
Seating Positions ........................97
Child Safety Locks .........................37
Clean Air Gasoline ........................577
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................702
Climate Control ..........................421
Automatic ............................421
Coin Holder .............................307
Cold Weather Operation ....................475
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............418
Compact Spare Tire........................559
Console ................................307
Console, Floor ...........................307
Contract, Service ..........................739
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........694
Cooling System...........................690
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............692
Coolant Capacity .......................725
Coolant Level ..........................695
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................694
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................691
Inspection .........................690, 695
Points To Remember .....................695
Pressure Cap ..........................694
Radiator Cap ..........................694
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......691, 725, 726
Corrosion Protection .......................700
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................187
Cruise Light..........................357, 358
Cupholders .............................305
Customer Assistance .......................737
10
INDEX 749
Data Recorder, Event .......................90
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............174
Daytime Running Lights ....................168
Dealer Service............................664
Defroster, Rear Window.....................313
Defroster, Windshield ................116,423, 424
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................661
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................171
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................665
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................652
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................694
Door Ajar ...........................336, 337
Door Ajar Light .......................336, 337
Door Locks
Door Locks ............................34
KeyFob...............................34
Remote ...............................34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................34
Door Locks, Automatic ......................36
Door Opener, Garage.......................282
Driver Information Display
DID.................................373
Instrument Cluster Display ................373
Driver Information Display (DID)
Instrument Cluster ......................372
Oil Change ............................372
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................149
Driving ................................506
E-85 Fuel ...............................581
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........296
Electric Parking Brake ......................512
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................134
Electronic Brake Control System ...............520
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................520
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................532
750 INDEX
Traction Control System ...................526
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .................493
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....183, 187
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............527
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........335
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......280
Change Engine Oil ......................363
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .361
Selectable Menu Items ....................364
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................617
Jacking ...............................631
Jump Starting ..........................644
Overheating ...........................617
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........662
Engine..............................659, 660
Air Cleaner ...........................669
Block Heater ..........................482
Break-In Recommendations ................113
Checking Oil Level ......................665
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................726
Cooling ..............................690
Exhaust Gas Caution .................115,581
Fails To Start ..........................476
Flooded, Starting .......................476
Fuel Requirements ......................577
Jump Starting ..........................644
Oil...........................665, 725, 726
Oil Filler Cap ...................659, 660, 667
Oil Filter .............................668
Oil Selection .......................666, 725
Oil Synthetic ..........................668
Overheating ...........................617
Starting ...........................474, 475
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................667
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................667
Enhanced
Accident Response Feature ............86
Entry System, Illuminated ....................22
10
INDEX 751
Ethanol .............................578, 581
Event Data Recorder ........................90
Exhaust Gas Caution....................115,581
Exhaust System .......................115,688
Exterior Lighting..........................165
Exterior Lights ...........................118
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................669
Air Conditioning ....................444, 677
Engine Oil .........................668, 726
Engine Oil Disposal .....................668
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................617
Turn Signal ..................118,170, 355, 721
Flash-To-Pass ............................171
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................584
Engine Oil ............................583
Fuel Requirements ...................581, 582
Maintenance ...........................584
Replacement Parts .......................584
Starting ..............................583
Flooded Engine Starting ....................476
Floor Console ............................307
Fluid, Brake .............................728
Fluid Capacities ..........................725
Fluid Leaks .............................118
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ................................696
Engine Oil ............................665
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........726
Fog Lights........................169, 337, 722
Fog Light Service .........................722
Folding Rear Seat .........................157
Forward Collision Warning ..................214
Four Wheel Drive .........................504
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................648
752 INDEX
Fuel...................................577
Additives .............................579
Clean Air .............................577
Ethanol ...........................578, 581
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................584
Gasoline ..............................577
Light ................................346
Materials Added ........................579
Methanol .............................578
Octane Rating ......................577, 726
Requirements ..........................577
Specifications ..........................726
Tank Capacity ..........................725
Fuel, Flexible ............................581
Fuses ..................................706
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........282, 289
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................584
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................577
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................577
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................577
Gear Ranges .............................487
Gear Select Lever Override ..................651
Glass Cleaning ...........................705
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................592
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................591
GVWR .................................589
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................617
Headlights
Automatic ............................166
Bulb Replacement .......................720
Cleaning .............................704
Delay ................................167
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........171
Lights On Reminder .....................169
On With Wipers ........................166
Passing ..............................171
10
INDEX 753
Replacing .............................720
Switch ...............................165
Time Delay ............................167
Head Restraints ..........................153
Head Rests..............................153
Heated Mirrors ...........................136
Heater..............................421, 426
Heater, Engine Block .......................482
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .171
Hill Descent Control .......................534
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................534
Hill Start Assist...........................523
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................594
Holder, Coin.............................307
Holder, Cup .............................305
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............282
Hood Release ............................164
Ignition
Key..................................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................17
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................126
Instrument Cluster ........321, 324, 332, 333, 349, 355
Instrument Cluster ...................363, 372
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............320
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............705
Interior Appearance Care....................703
Interior Fuses ............................716
Interior Lights ...........................172
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............176
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................300
Jacking Instructions........................635
Jack Location ............................632
Jack Operation ........................631, 635
754 INDEX
Jump Starting ............................644
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm .........................20
Panic Alarm ............................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters .......19, 26
Key-In Reminder ..........................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................39
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................390
Passive Entry Programming ................390
Unlock Liftgate .........................390
Keyless Entry System .......................23
Key, Replacement ..........................18
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................17
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............170
Lane Change Assist........................171
LaneSense ..............................218
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................56
Latches ................................118
Hood ................................164
Lead Free Gasoline ........................577
Leaks, Fluid .............................118
Life Of Tires .............................562
Liftgate .................................48
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............312
Light Bulbs ..........................118,718
Lights ..............................118,165
AirBag ........................87, 116, 328
Automatic Headlights ....................166
Back-Up ..............................723
Battery Saver ..........................174
Brake Assist Warning ....................530
Brake Warning .........................329
Bulb Replacement ....................718, 720
Cruise ............................357, 358
10
INDEX 755
Daytime Running .......................168
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............170, 171
Engine Temperature Warning ...............332
Exterior ..............................118
Fog ..........................169, 337, 722
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................617
Headlights .........................165, 720
Headlights On Reminder ..................169
Headlights On With Wipers ................166
Headlight Switch .......................165
High Beam ............................171
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............171
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..............534
Illuminated Entry ........................22
Instrument Cluster ......................165
Intensity Control ........................172
Interior ..............................172
License ..............................724
Lights On Reminder .....................169
Low Fuel .............................346
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........338
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........174
Park .............................354, 356
Passing ..............................171
Rear Servicing .........................723
Rear Tail Lamps ........................723
Seat Belt Reminder ......................327
Security Alarm .........................331
Service ...........................718, 720
Side Marker ...........................721
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........342, 569
Traction Control ........................530
Turn Signal ..............118,170, 355, 721, 723
Vanity Mirror ..........................136
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .332, 355
Load Floor, Cargo .........................309
Loading
Vehicle ..........................588
Tires ................................547
756 INDEX
Locks ..................................34
Automatic Door .........................36
Auto Unlock ...........................37
Child Protection .........................37
Door .................................34
Power Door ............................35
Low Tire Pressure System ...................569
Lubrication, Body .........................679
Luggage Carrier ..........................314
Lug Nuts ...............................618
Maintenance Free Battery....................674
Maintenance Procedures ....................664
Maintenance Schedule ......................730
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .338, 662
Manual, Service ..........................742
Marker Lights, Side........................721
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................696
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............160
Memory Seat ............................160
Memory Seats And Radio ...................160
Methanol ...............................578
Mirrors ................................126
Electric Powered ........................134
Electric Remote .........................134
Heated ...............................136
Outside ..............................133
Rearview .............................126
Vanity ...............................136
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................569
MOPAR Parts.........................663, 741
MTBE/ETBE ............................578
Multi-Function Control Lever .................170
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................113
Occupant Restraints ........................52
10
INDEX 757
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............577, 726
Oil, Engine ..........................665, 726
Capacity .............................725
Change Interval ........................666
Checking .............................665
Dipstick ..............................665
Disposal ..............................668
Filter .............................668, 726
Filter Disposal .........................668
Identification Logo ......................666
Materials Added To ......................668
Pressure Warning Light ...................332
Recommendation ....................666, 725
Synthetic .............................668
Viscosity ..........................667, 725
Oil Filter, Change .........................668
Oil Filter, Selection ........................668
Oil Pressure Light .........................332
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................661
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............282
Operating Precautions ......................661
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................133
Overheating, Engine .......................617
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........5,742
Paint Care ..............................700
Panic Alarm ..............................25
Parking Brake............................512
ParkSense System, Rear..................229, 239
Passing Light ............................171
Personalized Menu Bar .....................446
Pets ...................................113
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........548
Power
Brakes ...............................519
Door Locks ............................35
Inverter ..............................300
758 INDEX
Lift Gate ..............................50
Mirrors ..............................134
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........296
Sunroof ..............................291
Windows ..............................45
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............63
Preparation For Jacking .....................634
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................63
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires ..........................555
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........694
Radio Frequency
General Information ............17, 19, 29, 34, 44
Radio Operation ..........................419
Radio Remote Controls .....................416
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................415
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................179
Rear Camera ............................280
Rear Cross Path ..........................143
Rear ParkSense System ..................229, 239
Rear Seat, Folding .........................157
Rear Window Defroster .....................313
Rear Window Features .....................312
Rear Wiper/Washer........................312
Recorder, Event Data .......................90
Recreational Towing .......................604
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . .609
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ........609
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N) ...........................612
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ......612
Reformulated Gasoline .....................577
Refrigerant ..............................676
Release, Hood............................164
Reminder, Lights On .......................169
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................54
10
INDEX 759
Remote Control
Starting System .........................30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................23
Arm The Alarm .........................20
Panic Alarm ............................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters .......19, 26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........416
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................32
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .33, 392
Uconnect Settings ....................33, 392
Remote Starting System......................30
Replacement Bulbs ........................718
Replacement Keys .........................18
Replacement Parts.........................663
Replacement Tires .........................563
Reporting Safety Defects ....................741
Restraint, Head...........................153
Restraints, Child...........................91
Restraints, Occupant ........................52
Roll Over Warning ..........................4
Roof Type Carrier .........................314
Rotation, Tires ...........................567
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................116
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................118
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................741
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................115
Safety Information, Tire .....................541
Safety Tips ..............................114
Schedule, Maintenance .....................730
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......61
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........64
Energy Management Feature ................64
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................59
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................56
760 INDEX
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............61
Pregnant Women ........................63
Seat Belt Extender .......................62
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................63
Seat Belt Reminder .......................54
Seat Belt System .........................52
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................705
Seat Belt Reminder .........................54
Seat Belts.............................54, 116
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................61
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........61
Child Restraint ..........................91
Extender ..............................62
Front Seat ........................54, 56, 59
Inspection ............................116
Operating Instructions ....................59
Pregnant Women ........................63
Pretensioners ...........................63
Rear Seat ..............................56
Reminder .............................327
Untwisting Procedure .....................61
Seats ...............................146, 151
Adjustment ........................146, 148
Easy Entry ............................163
Head Restraints ........................153
Heated ...............................151
Memory ..............................160
Rear Folding ..........................157
Seatback Release ....................149, 157
Tilting ...............................149
Vented ...............................152
Ventilated .............................152
Security Alarm.........................19, 331
Arm The System ........................20
Selec-Terrain.............................504
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............726
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming .......................19
10
INDEX 761
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................17
Sentry Key Replacement .....................18
Service Assistance .........................737
Service Contract ..........................739
Service Manuals ..........................742
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..................485
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power Transfer
Unit Neutral (N) ....................609, 612
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................609
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................612
Shift Lever Override .......................651
Shoulder Belts ............................56
Side View Mirror Adjustment.................133
Signals, Turn...................118,170, 355, 721
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................564
Snow Tires ..............................557
Spare Tire ........................558, 559, 560
Spark Plugs .............................726
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................726
Oil..................................726
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ........................185, 186
Cancel ...............................185
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............183, 187
Starting ..........................30, 474, 475
Cold Weather ..........................475
Engine Fails To Start .....................476
Remote ...............................30
Starting And Operating..................474, 475
Starting Procedures.....................474, 475
Steering
Column Controls .......................170
Tilt Column ...........................180
Wheel, Heated .........................181
762 INDEX
Wheel, Tilt ............................180
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............416
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .416
Storage .............................308, 718
Storage, Vehicle .......................443, 718
Storing Your Vehicle .......................718
Stuck, Freeing............................648
Sun Roof ...............................291
Sun Visor Extension .......................137
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........67
Sway Control, Trailer ...................532, 593
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................668
System, Remote Starting .....................30
Telescoping Steering Column .................180
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).......432, 441
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................310
Tilt Steering Column .......................180
Time Delay, Headlight ......................167
Tip Start................................475
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......547, 548
Tire Markings ............................541
Tires.....................118,552, 558, 559, 743
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................562
Air Pressure ...........................552
Chains ...............................564
Changing .............................631
Compact Spare .........................559
General Information ...............552, 558, 559
High Speed ...........................555
Inflation Pressures .......................553
Jacking ...............................631
Life Of Tires ...........................562
Load Capacity ......................547, 549
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............569
Pressure Warning Light ...................342
Quality Grading ........................743
Radial ...............................555
10
INDEX 763
Replacement ...........................563
Rotation ..............................567
Safety ............................541, 552
Sizes ................................542
Snow Tires ............................557
Spare Tire ......................558, 559, 560
Spinning .............................561
Trailer Towing .........................599
Tread Wear Indicators ....................561
Tire Safety Information .....................541
Tire Service Kit . . . .620, 621, 622, 625, 626, 628, 629, 630
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................596
To Open Hood ...........................164
Torque Converter Clutch ....................494
Towing ..........................591, 595, 652
Disabled Vehicle ........................652
Recreational ...........................604
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........604
Traction Control ..........................526
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................532
Trailer Towing ...........................591
Cooling System Tips .....................603
Hitches ..............................594
Minimum Requirements ..................597
Trailer And Tongue Weight .............595, 596
Wiring ...............................601
Trailer Towing Guide.......................595
Trailer Weight ............................595
Transaxle ...............................483
Automatic ............................483
Operation .............................483
Transfer Case
Fluid ................................728
Transmission ............................485
Automatic .........................485, 698
Fluid ................................728
Maintenance ...........................698
T
ransmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
764 INDEX
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....282
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)..................23, 26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........23
Transporting Pets .........................113
Tread Wear Indicators ......................561
Turn Signals ......................170, 355, 721
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features .........33, 392
Operation .............................415
Screen Activated Features ..................24
Uconnect Settings ..................25, 33, 392
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information ...................467
Do Not Disturb ........................466
General Information .....................466
Siri Eyes Free ..........................465
Uconnect Settings .......................24, 25
Customer Programmable Features ...........390
Passive Entry Programming ................390
Uconnect Settings .......................390
Uconnect Voice Command ...................446
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................743
Universal Transmitter ......................282
Unleaded Gasoline ........................577
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................61
Vanity Mirrors ...........................136
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading .......................549, 588
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19
Vehicle Storage........................443, 718
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................667
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................446
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................617
10
INDEX 765
Warning, Roll Over .........................4
Warnings And Cautions ......................7
Warranty Information ......................741
Washers, Windshield....................174, 687
Washing Vehicle ..........................700
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................702
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................702
Wind Buffeting ........................48, 295
Window Fogging .........................443
Windows ................................45
Power ................................45
Windshield Defroster.......................116
Windshield Washers ....................174, 687
Fluid ................................687
Windshield Wiper Blades....................680
Windshield Wipers ........................174
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................680
Wipers, Intermittent .......................176
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................179
Wireless Charging Pad......................302
766 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
16MK74-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
16KL74-126-AB
Second Edition
768


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Jeep Cherokee - 2016 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Jeep Cherokee - 2016 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 5,75 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Jeep Cherokee - 2016

Jeep Cherokee - 2016 User Manual - English - 236 pages

Jeep Cherokee - 2016 User Manual - French - 276 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info